Canon | EOS 60D | User manual | Canon EOS 60D User manual

Canon EOS 60D User manual
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ EOS 60D‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ DIGIC 4‬ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٥٫٣‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪) Full HD‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٣٠٥‬ﻭ‪(٣٠٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ .SDXC‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﻊ ﻛﺄﺱ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E6/LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LP-E6‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫‪EW-EOS60D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E6‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E6E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LC-E6E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣١٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫>‪ : <U> <V> <9‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪،7‬‬
‫‪،9‬‬
‫‪،0‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫)ﺹ **( ‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <1‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪.EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ )‪ (DSLR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٢١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ‪١٠ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٧ .................................................................................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٨ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٣٠ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪٣١ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٣٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪٣٤ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٧ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٨ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٣٩ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٤٤ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٤٦ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪٤٨ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٤٨ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٠ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪٥١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ‪٥٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪٥٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥٨ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٥٩ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪٦٢ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪٦٣ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٦٤ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪٦٥ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪٦٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٦٧ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ‪٦٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪٧١ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٧٦ ................................................................... (AF‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٧٨ ..................................................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٨٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٨٠ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٨١ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٨٢ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٨٤ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٨٨ .........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٩٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٩٢ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٩٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪٩٧ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪٩٨ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٩ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٠١ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٠٢ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪١٠٤ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٠٦ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪١٠٨ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪١١٠ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١١٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١١٤ .............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪١١٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪١١٧ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪١١٨ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١١٩ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٢٠ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪١٢١ .......................................................................(AEB‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪١٢٢ ................................................................................(AE‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪١٢٣ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٢٥ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٢٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪١٢٧ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪١٣٠ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٣٥ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪١٣٩ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪١٤٨ .............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٥٢ ............................................................................. LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٥٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١٥٧ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٦٠ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٦٧ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٧٢ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٧٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٨٠ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٨٢ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٩٠ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٩١ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ HI‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪١٩٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩٧ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٩٨ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢٠٠ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٢٠٢ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٢٠٤ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٢٠٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٢٠٧ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪٢٠٩ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢١٣ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢١٥ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢١٧ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢١٧ ......................................................................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪٢١٨ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٢١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ‪٢٢٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪٢٢٢ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢٢٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٣٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪٢٣١ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٣٣ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٣٦ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٣٨ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٢٤٣ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪٢٤٥ ...................................................................(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٢٤٨ ....................................‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٢٥٠ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٢٥١ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪٢٥٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn I: Exposure‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٢٥٢ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn II: Image‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٢٥٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪٢٥٥ .............‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn IV: Operation/Others‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪٢٥٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٢٦١ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢٦٢ .............................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٢٦٦ .............................................................................................. B‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٦٨ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪٢٧٢ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪٢٧٣ ..........................................................................................Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٧٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢٧٨ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪٢٨٣ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ‪٢٩١ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪٢٩٢ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢٩٤ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٣٠٥ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٣١٤ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٣١٧ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫• ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٦٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ُﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤ َ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫• ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(C.Fn‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٦٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٢٥٩‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪٩٩,٩٩‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٠,٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮّﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Red index‬‬
‫‪White index‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) .<AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) .LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪<x‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٥‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﺹ **(‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <f‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF‬ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫>‪ <i‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( )ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٧٩/١٣٠‬‬
‫>‪ <n‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF-S‬ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٢‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٢/١٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١١٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٣ ،١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣٦ ،٢١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٢/١٥٢‬‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٣ ،١٥٣ ،٧٦ ،٤٠‬‬
‫>‪<A/I‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٤٣ ،١٩٦/١٩٤/١٣٤/١٢٢‬‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫>‪<S/u‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪/(AF‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٤٣ ،١٩٦/٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺹ ‪(٢١٥‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٢١٧ ،٢٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٠‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ‪Info‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦٦ ،١٩٠ ،١٧٦ ،١٥٤ ،١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫>‪<R/l‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ /‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٤١/٤٢‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )] ‪([ - -- --- -- -‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CLn‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪4 L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫>‪<g‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫>‪<u‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫> < ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪(D buSY‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‪ (F/a/f/s/d‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦٢‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٦‬‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٨‬‬
‫‪ : F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫‪ : 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫‪ : C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ : 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫‪ : 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫‪ : 5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫‪ : 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪ : k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٧١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٠١‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧ ،٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧ ،٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٠١‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻣﺭﺭﻩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺇﺑﺯﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺧﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﺯﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪LC-E6‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺭﺩ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٪٤۹ - ۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٪۷٤ - ٥۰‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫‪ ٪۷٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪-‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ٤۱ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ‪ ٥۰ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ( ﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ )ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻭﺳﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫< ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺫ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻭﻗﺻﺭ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﺻﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲٦۸‬ﻭﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ٪۹٤ (۲٦۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻭﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪°١٨٠‬‬
‫‪°٩٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪°١٧٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻳﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻝ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻛﺳﺭﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ً ‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ ،<2‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﻗﺩ ﻳُﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺧﻔﻳﻑ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺭﺽ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (٤۰‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤۰‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ٍ [Recording ...‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻣﺽ )‪ (b‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )‪۱۰ - ۱۹ ۲۰ - ٤۹ ٥۰ - ٦۹ ۷۰ - ۱۰۰ (٪‬‬
‫‪۱-۹‬‬
‫‪۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٪٥۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٣٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪BG-E9‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ‪ :LP-E6 x 2‬ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪) AA/LR6‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ۷۳ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ *** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪.٪٥۰‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [7 Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲٦۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E9‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺫﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪) .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪(.[x/m‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪.<r‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(.s‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ .SDXC‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﺣﺭﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [1Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻧﺳﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۷۸‬‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ "‪"Recording...‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ (...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ‪) ۰۰۰۱‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(٤۸‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ SDXC‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪) UHS‬ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.۱۰‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪:EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۱۸‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱,٦‬ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)‪ ۱٤٫۹ × ۲۲٫۳‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۰٫٥۹ × ۰٫۸۸ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫)‪ ۲٤ × ۳٦‬ﻣﻠﻡ ‪ ۰,۹٤ × ۱,٤۲ /‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻫﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﺑًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء >‪ <o‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ > < ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻔﻙ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺟﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻛﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ُﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ ،(IS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻛﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭً ﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺗﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ ۱۰) E‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻟﻑ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻙ ﻭﻣﺭﻓﻘﻳﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻗﺩﻣﻳﻙ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٥۷‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫)‪.(0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺛﻝ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫>‪ ،<i‬ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫)‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺛﻝ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫>‪ ،<i‬ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫)‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) UNLOCK‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [6Lock5‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪(.d/s/f‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Lock5: Enable‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <R‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Lock5‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،(0) <R‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ 8) .<5‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ >‪<V‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <U‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪/(9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<U‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۲٦٦‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <Q‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٦۷ ،٤٤‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V> <U‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ* )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲٥۷‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۸٤‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۹٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ* )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۹٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺣﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪<0> ‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫< ﺃﻭ > <‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺅﺧﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ >‪ <V> <U‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪<V> <U‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪3‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪) .‬ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ً <5‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻕ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻧﻙ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۷۸‬‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Low level‬‬
‫‪) [format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪ ،<X‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۹۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪.Microsoft‬‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Image review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Image‬‬
‫‪) [review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Clear all‬‬
‫‪) [camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Clear all camera‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫‪AF mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪point‬‬
‫‪selection‬‬
‫‪Automatic selection‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Metering mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) q‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ISO speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪ISO Auto‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Drive mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‪۳۲۰۰ :‬‬
‫‪) u‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪) Canceled compensation/AEB‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪Flash exposure‬‬
‫‪) compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ‪) 0‬ﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Lock 5‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‬
‫‪Custom Functions‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪Picture Style‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪Auto Lighting‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫‪) Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪Peripheral‬‬
‫‪illumination‬‬
‫‪correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪/‬‬
‫‪Correction data‬‬
‫‪) retained‬ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ(‬
‫‪Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪White balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪Custom white balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫‪WB correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪Auto cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Dust Delete Data‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Canceled‬‬
‫)ﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪Canceled‬‬
‫)ﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪Canceled‬‬
‫)ﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪Continuous‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Erased‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ(‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪Release shutter‬‬
‫‪without card‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪Image review‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Highlight alert‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬
‫‪AF point display‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Histogram‬‬
‫)ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪Image jump w/ 6‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(6‬‬
‫‪Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) 2 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪Live mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Grid display‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫‪Aspect ratio‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪۲:۳‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪) simulation‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ(‬
‫‪Silent shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪(۱‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰) e‬ﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪Metering timer‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪ ۱٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪On zD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪Unchanged Camera user settings‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪Unchanged Copyright information‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪Live View shooting‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪Video system‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪button display‬‬
‫‪All items selected INFO.‬‬
‫‪) options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪(INFO.‬‬
‫‪Control over HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫‪Eye-Fi transmission‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻞ ‪(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪Movie exposure‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪Live mode‬‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪AF w/ shutter button‬‬
‫‪during k‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ‪(k‬‬
‫‪AF and metering‬‬
‫‪buttons fork‬‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻟـ ‪(k‬‬
‫‪k Highlight tone‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪priority‬‬
‫)‪ k‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Movie recording‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪۱۰۸۰×۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪) size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Sound recording‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪Silent shooting‬‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪(۱‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫‪Metering timer‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪ ۱٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪Grid display‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ً .(٢٧٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٨٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.(<o‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (.<o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٣,١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻇﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻟﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ( ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ >‪.(<5‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ > <‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ CA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<C‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.٦١-٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٦٨‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ" ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٦٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺍﻟﻤُﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ٍ ١٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ُﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٨٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤ َ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ،LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <R‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <b‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻫﻮًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<4‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫>‪ ٠,٤٥) <40.45m/1.5ft‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ١٫٥/‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫>‪) <V‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﺍﻛﻀﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻃﻔﻼ‬
‫>‪) <5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٥٫٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) Shoot by ambience selection‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫‪) Shoot by lighting or scene type‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ٍ ١٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٥٤‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٥٨‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٥٩‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٦٢‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٦٣‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٦٤‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) (٦٥‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪) Single shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ( ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ >‪) <7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫‪6 5 4 3 2 C 7 1‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺯﺍﻩ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫)‪ (٨‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫)‪ (٩‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪/‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪<3> <2> <C> :‬‬
‫>‪<6> <5> <4‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(7) <Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Standard‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪Shoot by‬‬
‫‪) [ambience selection‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Effect‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Standard‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[6 LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Shoot by ambience selection‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Shoot by lighting or scene‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ >‪ <2‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ >‪ <3‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺯﺍ ٍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺯﺍ ٍﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫]‪) [Standard setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻋﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺪﻭءًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٨‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٩‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻴًﺎ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ >‪) <2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭ>‪) <3‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ( ﻭ>‪) <4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ( ﻭ>‪) <5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪) [Default setting‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Shoot by ambience selection‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٦٨‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 C 7 1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪6 5 4‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪<3> <2> :‬‬
‫>‪<5> <4‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(7) <Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Default‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪Shoot‬‬
‫‪) [by lighting or scene type‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Default‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ]‪) [Default setting‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Shoot by ambience selection‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Shoot by lighting or scene type‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫]‪) [Sunset‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴًﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻤﺎ ًء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺧﻀﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺿﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٧‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
٧٤
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﺴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F /a /f /s /d‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<f‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ : X‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ : 9‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ : Z‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1 Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٧٨‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Servo‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ .<9‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،EOS‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪<7> :‬‬
‫>‪.<5> <3‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٣,١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪f/5.6‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*f/2.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻛﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪f/5.6‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ ‪ EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM‬ﻭ‪.EF50mm f/2.5‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <4 L‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎ ًَﻣﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<R‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪: u‬‬
‫‪:o‬‬
‫‪: i‬‬
‫‪: Q‬‬
‫‪:k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٥٫٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪) <Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<R‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ِ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ :k‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ >‪ <k‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٢٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٥٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻘﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<R‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻭﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F /a /f /s /d‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ .c/b/8a/7a/84/74/83/73 :JPEG‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪) 61 ،41 ،1 :RAW‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Quality‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<U‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪) ***M‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ( **** ‪ "**** x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]***[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 73‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪1+73‬‬
‫‪61+74‬‬
‫*ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]–[ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.73‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ٠٫٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫—‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫‪41 RAW‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫١‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫*‪**٫*+**٫‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫١‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫*‪**٫*+**٫‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫*‪**٫*+**٫‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪7a‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪8a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪73 JPEG‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫*‪**٫‬‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫*‪ b :١‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ c :٢‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ‪ b‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪) 7‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪) Canon‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.(.CR2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ RAW) 41 ،(RAW) 1 :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ RAW) 61‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪) 7 ،JPEG ،‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ(‪) 8 ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪) 3 ،‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‪) 4 ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) 6‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ 1 :‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 41‬ﺃﻭ ‪.61‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [3 RAW image processing‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) (RAW‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٢٤‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪ 61‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ (.‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٨٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﻮ "‪ "٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪."٩٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢ - ٢‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2: Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ "‪ "٩٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٥‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<i‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ISO 100-6400‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪100 - 400‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫‪400 - 1600‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬
‫‪1600 - 6400, H‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣١‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٣ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) ،[1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭ"‪"H‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO 12800‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -3: ISO expansion‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣ - ١‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) ،[1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ً (ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) "A" ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ "‪،"A‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪6/5/4/3/C/7/1‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 3200‬‬
‫‪a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪100 - 6400‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 100‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١*ISO‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 400‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪400‬‬
‫‪٣*٢*ISO‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٣‬ﻓﻲ >‪ <d‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء >‪ ،(<6‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ISO 400 - 1600‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [400‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[800‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫‪ .ISO 400 - 6400‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 400‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1600‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 3200‬ﺃﻭ ‪.6400‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[y‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO Auto‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) Standard P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Portrait Q‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٩٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Landscape R‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<3‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪) Neutral S‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Faithful U‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Monochrome V‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Monochrome‬‬
‫)ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪) User Def. 1-3 W‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣-١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٩٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ -‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ :+7‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ :-4‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :+4‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪ :-4‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :+4‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :-4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ :+4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( ﻭ]‪Toning‬‬
‫‪) [effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :N‬ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Ye‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ :Or‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪[User Def. 1‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.٩٣-٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ )ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(٥١‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]* ‪[User Def.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ :K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠ - ٣٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٥٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪٧٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﻖ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫‪٦٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪٣٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٤٠٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬
‫‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[O‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٢٠‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪ .[O‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻔﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[White balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB Shift/‬‬
‫‪) [BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪G1 ،A2 :‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"Shift‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <u‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ؛ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫" " ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "‬
‫" )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"Bracket‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪(B‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ (M‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪.(G‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫"ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪N‬‬
‫‪ُ 3‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Auto Lighting‬‬
‫‪) [Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٣ - ٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ّ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Peripheral illumin. correct.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Peripheral‬‬
‫‪) [illumin. correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction‬‬
‫‪) [data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select folder‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "100CANON‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .(٩٩٩٩ - ٠٠٠١‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٠٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ."DCIM‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ "100ABC_D‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩ - ١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ "‪ "100ABC_D‬ﻭ "‪ "100W_XYZ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.IMG_0001.JPG :‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ .٩٩٩٩‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Card-2‬‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Card-2‬‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪Card-1‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXX-0001‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑـ "_‪ ."MVI‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ"‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻭ"‪ "MOV‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copyright information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) [information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enter author’s name‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Enter copyright details‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Display copyright info.‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Delete copyright information‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ .(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪sRGB‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٫٠‬‬
‫)‪ .(Exif 2.21‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪"_MG‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ICC‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻤﻨﻄ‬
‫ﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪.(F /a /f /s /d‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٧٦‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٧٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ 1/2000 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ 1/30 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ "‪ "8000‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "125‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٢٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ""‪"15‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) (f/32 :‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(f/5.6 :‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <R‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(0) <5‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ **‪٪‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ **‪٪‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،١/٣‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪) [2 Exp. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <d‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <s‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )‪،(0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<R‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ (0) <5‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻣﺎ ًﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [6 Lock 5‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪،<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،(0) <R‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Expo. comp./‬‬
‫‪) [AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<u‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <i‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪N(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<A‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪wre‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -1: Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:١ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ :٢) [2: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٦‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ً‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺳﻢ‪/‬ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ RS-60E3‬ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn III -5: Mirror lockup‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٥ - ٣‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﻭ‪.RC-5‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<R‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<k‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪[7 INFO. button display options‬‬
‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (INFO.‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪.°١±‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١٧٦ ،١٥٤‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.IV‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪8C.Fn IV: Operation/‬‬
‫‪) [Others‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :IV‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪Assign] 2- IV‬‬
‫‪) [SET button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ"(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[2‬‬
‫]‪) [Assign SET button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪SET‬‬
‫"ﺿﺒﻂ"( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[sViewfinder Q] :[5‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪:[5‬‬
‫]‪) [sViewfinderQ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء >‪ ،(<5> <3> <7‬ﺳﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ّ .‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <C‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪) E-TTL II‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪ C 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٦٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٦٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٧ - ١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) (Av‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٥٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ >‪.<f‬‬
‫• ‪) Auto :٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(*‬
‫• ‪) 1/250 - 1/60 sec. auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٦٠ - ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ‪ ١/٢٥٠) 1/250 sec. (fixed) :٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ((‬
‫* ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪f/3.5‬‬
‫‪f/4‬‬
‫]ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪800‬‬
‫‪42 / 138 30 / 97 21 / 69 15 / 49 11 / 34 7.5 / 24 5.5 / 17 3.5 / 12‬‬
‫‪9 / 30 6.5 / 21 4.5 / 15 3 / 11‬‬
‫‪f/5.6‬‬
‫‪1600‬‬
‫‪3200‬‬
‫‪6400‬‬
‫‪H: 12800‬‬
‫‪36 / 121 26 / 85 18 / 60 13 / 43‬‬
‫‪19 / 61 13 / 43 9.5 / 30 6.5 / 22 4.5 / 15 3.5 / 11 2.5 / 7.5‬‬
‫‪26 / 86‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣٫٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ٣٫٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻻﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء >‪<7‬‬
‫>‪.<k> <5> <3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Red-eye‬‬
‫‪) [reduc.‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <Q‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[y‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻭ>‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[*y‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <y‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺳﻴﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn IV -2: Assign SET button‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٢- ٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ"( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [4: sFlash exp. comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(8) .<A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "FEL‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<D‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻻ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪[External flash func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Built-in flash func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﻭ]‪External flash‬‬
‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪External flash‬‬
‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫]‪Built-in flash‬‬
‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫*‪) FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*(‬
‫—‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫*‪) Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫—‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪) [Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺮﻏﺒﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Flash output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )‪ ١/١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ (١/١٢٨‬ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1st curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ؛ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Hi-speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )‪ .(e‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [flash C.Fn setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Clear ext. flash C.Fn set.‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٤٤‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪ ٣٢٫٨‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٫٠‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٫٠‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪ ١٦٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )‪(PILOT‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ >‪ <0‬ﻭ>‪<1‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫>‪ <3‬ﻭ>‪ <2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Built-in flash func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[E-TTL II‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [1All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [E-TTL II meter.‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ (E-TTL II‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٤١‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[0:3‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [1:2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ .1:1‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) 1:1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(1:8‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1:1‬ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1:1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II :‬‬
‫‪Flash mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Evaluative : E-TTL II meter.‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫)ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪(E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪0 : Wireless func.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ‪) :‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [1All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ‪A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(C‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫])‪ [1(A:B‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،B‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪A‬‬
‫)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (A‬ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪B‬‬
‫)ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (B‬ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[1 (A:B‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [A:B fire ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ‪(A:B‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ ،[1 (A:B‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ C‬ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1:1‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1:1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1:3‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.١٤٤-١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II :‬‬
‫‪Flash mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪) Evaluative : E-TTL II meter.‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫)ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪(E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪[3+0] : Wireless func.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ‪) :‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫]‪[1All and 2‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪[1 (A:B) 2‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[E-TTL II‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Firing group‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [2exp. comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [1exp. comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [A,B exp. comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪(A،B‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[E-TTL II‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )]‪) [1flash output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Group A output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ (A‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Wireless func.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Wireless func.: 0‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Firing group: 1All‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫])‪) [Firing group: 1 (A:B‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ :((A:B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪.B‬‬
‫]‪) [Wireless func.: 0+3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Firing group: 1All and 2‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Firing group: 1(A:B) 2‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )‪ :((A:B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ .B‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EX‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlites‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(١٣٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [1 exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻭ]‪) [E-TTL II meter.‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ (E-TTL II‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Shutter sync.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١/٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪z Silent‬‬
‫‪) [shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٥٩‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
١٥٠
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٧-١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ > < ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ >‪<E‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ > < ﻭ>‪ <E‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺟﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [z Live View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٧٣ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ °٣٢ /‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫***‬
‫***‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٦٩-١٦٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <x‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[5 Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٥٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [5 Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٠٩‬ﻭ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫• ‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫• ‪ :c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEB‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Expo. simulation: Enable‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٦٦‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ ،<g‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ )ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ((‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ((‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪f / R / i‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <R‬ﺃﻭ >‪<i‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٦٧‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٦‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [z‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Live View shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٦٠‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[u Live mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٦١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [4:3‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[16:9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[1:1‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.[1:1] [16:9] [4:3] :‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]‪ .[3:2‬ﻭﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]‪ [4:3‬ﻭ]‪ [16:9‬ﻭ]‪ ،[1:1‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪٢:٣‬‬
‫‪٣:٤‬‬
‫‪٩:١٦‬‬
‫‪١:١‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪٣٤٥٦x٥١٨٤‬‬
‫)‪ ١٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫)‪ ١٦٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٢٩١٢x٥١٨٤‬‬
‫)‪ ١٥٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٤٥٦x٣٤٥٦‬‬
‫)‪ ١١٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠٤x٣٤٥٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٣٠٤x٣٠٧٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٩٤٤x٣٤٥٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٦٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٣٠٤x٢٣٠٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪٢٥٩٢x٣٨٨٨‬‬
‫)‪ ١٠٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٥٩٢x٣٤٥٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٩٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٢١٨٨x٣٨٨٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٥٩٢x٢٥٩٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٦٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪١٧٢٨x٢٥٩٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٧٢٨x٢٣٠٤‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٤٥٦x٢٥٩٢‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٧٢٨x١٧٢٨‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*١٢٨٠x١٦٩٦‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٢٨٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٧٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣١٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*٤٠٠x٧٢٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٩٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٤٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS 60D‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪١:١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻭ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )‪(g‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )‪(E‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪N‬‬
‫• ‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ** ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ TS-E‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.((٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫‪) Metering timerN‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [y Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[6 Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7 Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [7 Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻭ]‪u Live‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٦١‬ﻭ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[AF mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪d :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ > < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪c :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<L‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ( ‪.u‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻭﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻓﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪f :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٧٦‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N .(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻀﻲء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [6 LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
١٧٠
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<k‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦‬ﻟـ ‪SD‬‬
‫"‬
‫" ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪) 1080‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٠٩‬ﻭ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١٦٧-١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <A‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪"o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ١٨٧‬ﻭ‪.١٨٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ١٦٨‬ﻭ‪.١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ > < ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ>‪ <E‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ > <‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <E‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺟﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <A‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٢٢‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (ISO‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٧٦‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫>‪<6><5‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ ، [n‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫>‪.<9‬‬
‫‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٦٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪7/8‬‬
‫• ‪ ١/٤٠٠٠ : 4 / 5 / 6‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ١/٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<R‬‬
‫)‪ ،(8‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<i‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ISO 100 - 6400‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ISO 100 - 6400‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺑـ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٩٢‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (Exif‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫• ‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫• ‪ :c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ :L‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :K‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ*‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫* ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٦٦‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [u Live mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٠٩‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺩﺧﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [n‬ﻭ]‪ [o‬ﻭ]‪[Z‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٦‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ .<k‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<2‬‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ** :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ** :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<k‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]‪ [1920x1080‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[1280x720‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]‪ ،[640x480‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪f / R / i‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <R‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٧٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[o‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪Movie‬‬
‫‪) [rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]****‪ [****x‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [9‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[6 Video system‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) HD‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[1280x720‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫]‪[640x480‬‬
‫]‪ : [Crop 640x480‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٧‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪ : [6] [8‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪) NTSC‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [5] [7‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ‪) PAL‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ‬
‫]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ ]‪ [1920x1080‬ﻭ]‪ [1280x720‬ﺳﻴﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ ]‪ [640x480‬ﻭ]‪ ،[Crop 640x480‬ﺳﻴﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪) .<A‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫]‪[1280x720‬‬
‫]‪[640x480‬‬
‫]‪[Crop 640x480‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪(٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ٢ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪[1920×1080‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪ [1280×720‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪.[640×480‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ [n‬ﻭ]‪ [o‬ﻭ]‪ [Z‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪ [n‬ﻭ]‪ [o‬ﻭ]‪ [Z‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<k‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[n‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .١٦٦-١٦٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ‪) k‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻟـ ‪k‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 200‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭ‪ .6400‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪Crop‬‬
‫‪) [640x480‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪.((٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺩﺧﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٦‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [Sound rec.‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rec. level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ ١٢-) "12‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ "‪ ،"0‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Wind filter‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) L‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻭ‪) R‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Z‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .١٠١‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [n‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪[k Highlight tone priority‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .٩٥-٩٠‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .٩٨-٩٦‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،٩٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Quick mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٧٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ( ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٠٩‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ [1920×1080‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[1280×720‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٠٩‬ﻭ‪ (٢١٢‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ >‪<P‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<G‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <1+‬ﺇﻟﻰ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [.4 AF point disp‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Histogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴًﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Î‬‬
‫‪Î‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<V‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ :e‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :g‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ :h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ :i‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :j‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ : k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭ]‪) [Stills‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫‪ y/u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<u‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<x‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪°٠ → °٢٧٠ → °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [5 Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [5 Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On zD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ l‬ﻭ‪ m‬ﻭ‪ n‬ﻭ‪ o‬ﻭ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪ .(٩٩٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[###‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪3 Protect Images] :‬‬
‫)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ‪) 3 Rotate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ( ﻭ‪) 4 Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﻭ‪3 Creative filters‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ﻭ)‪) 3 Resize (JPEG images only‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭ‪) 4 Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻭ‪) 4 AF point display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭ‪) 4 Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ([‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٢٠‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٢٢‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [5 Auto rotate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،EOS 60D‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢١٢ ،٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ (Full HD: 1920x1080‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (HD: 1280x720‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(٢٠٨-٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ PDF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ZoomBrowser EX/‬‬
‫‪(ImageBrowser‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ZoomBrowser‬‬
‫‪) EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ ،ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MOV‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <1s‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<U‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ' ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ''‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٠٤‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٠٩‬ﻭ‪ (٢١٢‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٥‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪) [U‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[V‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪) <5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [7‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Overwrite‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑـ ]‪ ،([X‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [All images/Movies/Stills‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) jAll images] :‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) zStills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date/Folder/Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) iDate] :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪/nFolder/‬‬
‫‪) Rating‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ([‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪ ،<zH‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪jAll images‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) iDate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) nFolder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) zStills‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 9Rating‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Display time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Set up‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [Display time‬ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Transition effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Transition effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[ Loading image...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،(...‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠٩‬ﻭ‪.٢١٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<D‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <q‬ﻭ>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ *HDMI CEC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.(HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Ctrl over‬‬
‫‪) [HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،(HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Return‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ً HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،HDMI CEC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4 Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<q‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [6 Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Protect images‬‬
‫)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<M‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٣‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[3 Protect images‬‬
‫)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[All images in folder‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪All images on‬‬
‫‪) [card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Unprotect all‬‬
‫‪) [images in folder‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Unprotect all images on card‬‬
‫)ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢١٦‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪٢١٤‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢١٣‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Erase‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢١٥‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select and erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<V‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [3 Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫‪٢١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.(LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٣‬‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OnD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٨‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪.EOS 60D‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺒﺮﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<C‬‬
‫‪٢١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ّﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪.61‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Creative filters‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[3 Creative filters‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ّﻐﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،1+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 41+JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،61+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﻳﻐﻤﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫)ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢١‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ b/a /4/3 JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ JPEG c‬ﻭ‪.RAW‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [3Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‪ [8.0M 3456x2304‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٢:٣‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Quality‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫‪3456x2304‬‬
‫)‪ ٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪2592x1728‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪1920x1280‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪720x480‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫‪3456x1944‬‬
‫‪3072x2304‬‬
‫)‪ ٦٫٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫)‪ ٧٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*2592x1456‬‬
‫‪2304x1728‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫)‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪*1696x1280‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪*720x400‬‬
‫‪640x480‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٩٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫)‪ ٣١٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪1:1‬‬
‫‪2304x2304‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٫٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪1728x1728‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪1280x1280‬‬
‫)‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪480x480‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٣٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪٢٢٣‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ً RAW‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪ 61‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[RAW image processing‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(RAW‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[3RAW image processing‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،(RAW‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 1 W‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) RAW‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٢٧ ،٢٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V> <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ "ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ"‬
‫ﻭ"ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ" ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [W‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ **‪ x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪Magnify‬‬
‫)ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )]‪[4:3‬‬
‫]‪ ([1:1] [16:9‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٥‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[P‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ]‪) [Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪،[8.0M 3456x2304‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ .٢:٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٢٦‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ LCD‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ )ﺇﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Picture Style’s‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ (.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ (.‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ Professional‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٦٠‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٨‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﻟﻨﻔﺾ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺮﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣ ً‬
‫ُﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﺼﺎ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻀﺮ ﺟﺴﻤًﺎ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[y‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Dust Delete Data‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪ ٠٫٧‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪ ١ -‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "CLn‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٣٤‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪ <C‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻗﺪ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٦w‬‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪Bubble Jet‬‬
‫‪.Direct‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 37 JPEG‬ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ 41‬ﻭ‪.(61‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٧‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪Q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Y‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Borderless‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ( ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bordered c‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠) 20-up c‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٣٥) 35-up c‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪Letter‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٥‬‬
‫• ]‪ ٢٠) [20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٩‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EVIVID‬ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENR‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪B/W 0‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cool tone 0‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Warm tone 0‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) zNatural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪zNatural M‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫"‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EDefault‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤٢‬‬
‫‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<l‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻫﻮ ‪.١‬‬
‫)ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ (.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٤٣‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(٥١‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤١‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،٢٤٠‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ .<9‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٢‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠±‬ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٣‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪٢٤٥‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪Print type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪Index‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪Both‬‬
‫)ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[All image‬‬
‫)ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ >‪ <X‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Mark all in folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear all in‬‬
‫‪) [folder‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﻭﺗﺤﺪﺑﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear‬‬
‫‪) [all on card‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬
‫"‪) "By n‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ "‪) All image‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪".‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤٧‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٢٣٦‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٤٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤٤‬‬
‫‪٢٤٨‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻤﻨﻄ‬
‫ﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ I‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،(IV‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[8‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[8C.Fn IV -4: Focusing Screen‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤-٤‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn I: Exposure‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn II: Image‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٦‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫‪(f) k‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn IV: Operation/Others‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٩‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦٠‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٨‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ‪(٥‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪) .(LV‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn I: Exposure‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١-١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ ١/٣ :٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ ١/٢ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢ - ١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪ ١/٣ :٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ ١ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣ - ١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .(ISO 12800‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣ - ٢‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) ،[Enable :1‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤ - ١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪) On :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) Off :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥ - ١‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪+ ،- ،٠ :٠‬‬
‫‪+ ،٠ ،- :١‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦ - ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )‪(Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (s‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٧ - ١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫‪) Auto :٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 1/250-1/60 sec. auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٢٥٠-١/٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٢٥٠) 1/250 sec. (fixed) :٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .١‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn II: Image‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On :٢‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢ - ٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard :٠‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) :٢‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫‪) Low :١‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫‪ :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺌﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣ - ٢‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 200‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.6400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١ - ٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ؛ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢ - ٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪S :٠‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪9 /‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ >‪.<9‬‬
‫‪S :١‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪9 /‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Assign SET button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ"( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.٢-٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣ - ٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻜﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﺸﺘﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤ - ٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ - EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disabled‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٣/٢/٠-٤ ٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥- ٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn IV: Operation/Others‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [AF and metering buttons‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١ - ٤‬‬
‫]‪) [AF point selection method‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ :((AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢ - ٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Assign SET button‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ((‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢ - ٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١- ٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻭﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢-٤‬‬
‫‪) Assign SET button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ"(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺑﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :٣‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :٤‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) ١-٢- ٣‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Assign SET button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ"(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣- ٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ .<5‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬًﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤-٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ef-A :٠‬‬
‫‪Ef-D :١‬‬
‫‪Ef-S :٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :Ef-A‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯ ًﻧﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Ef-D‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ .Ef-A‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Ef-S‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ .Ef-A‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Ef-S‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ f/2.8‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،f/2.8‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.Ef-A‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻁ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.٤-٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ EOS 60D‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ،Ef-A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٠-٤-٤‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٤-٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦٢‬‬
‫‪٢٥٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥-٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٩١‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.OSK-E3‬‬
‫‪٢٦٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register to My Menu‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register to My Menu‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪) [Delete item/items] .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ً [9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦١‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Camera user settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Camera user‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ <w‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٢‬‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫]‪[1‬‬
‫]‪[2‬‬
‫]‪[y‬‬
‫]‪[z‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫]‪[5‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[7‬‬
‫]‪[8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ،E-TTL II‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ،(AEB‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،w/6‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<w‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7Clear all camera‬‬
‫]‪) settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭ])‪[8Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<w‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ >‪) <w‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٦٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦٣‬‬
٢٦٤
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪) [Displays camera settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭ]‪[Displays shooting functions‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦٧‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Electronic level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪) [INFO. button display options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (INFO.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<INFO.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Displays camera settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Electronic level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ >‪<w‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٠ ،٩٩‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣١‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥٤‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥٤‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥ ،٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢٦٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ y‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.C‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <R‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <i‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<S‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪.<9‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪) "Shooting settings display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Battery info.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٩‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .LP-E6‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.BG-E9‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E9‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫< ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪Cannot‬‬
‫>‬
‫‪) [communicate with battery‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<M‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫‪ BG-E9‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪.ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٧١‬‬
‫‪٢٦٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫‪0300‬‬
‫‪7c40‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ×‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ٠٫٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٢‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E9‬ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺰﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣ ّ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ُﺮﻛﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete info.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٦٩‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Delete info.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ <X> W‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ )ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻨّﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) .Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Eye-Fi settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،(Eye-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Eye-Fi trans.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Enable‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ‪.(I‬‬
‫‪٢٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Connection info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Access point SSID:‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ )‪ (SSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.(:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Access‬‬
‫‪) [point SSID:‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ (SSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.(:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi card‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ O‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩١‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪) H‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) H‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ( ) H‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦٧‬‬
‫‪٢٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ " "‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Eye-Fi trans.‬ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٥‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪z k F a fs d 6 5 4 3 2 C 7 1‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪PPPRQPPP‬‬
‫‪k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ِّ‬
‫‪k k k k k o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ z‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٦‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪k k k k k o‬‬
‫‪o o o‬‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪AI Focus‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪o o o‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪k k k k k o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o o o o o o o o‬‬
‫‪o o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k‬‬
‫‪k o o‬‬
‫‪o o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪o k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ*‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ١٠ Q‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k k k k‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪k k k k k o‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪z k F a fs d 6 5 4 3 2 C 7 1‬‬
‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k k k k k‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪Release shutter without card‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) Image review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Red-eye reduction‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫‪Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c‬‬
‫‪61 / 41 / 1‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪8 sec. /‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) 2 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec. /‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪) Hold /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬
‫)‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪) Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪Built-in flash function setting /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ‪External flash function setting /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ‪External flash C.Fn setting /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ‪Clear external flash /‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn setting‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Exposure compensation/AEB‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Disable Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Low /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ‪) Standard /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Strong /‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) QPortrait /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Picture Style‬‬
‫‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) UFaithful /‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪) WUser Def. 1, 2, 3 /‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(3 ،2 ،1‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ٥± ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪Q/W/E/R/Y/U/I/O/P‬‬
‫)ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪(١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪Custom White Balance‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫‪ :WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪) WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪ :WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪٩٥-٩٠‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٣‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪) ISO Auto‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ / ٤٠٠ :‬ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ / ٨٠٠ :‬ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪/ ١٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ / ٣٢٠٠ :‬ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪٦٤٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧٨‬‬
‫‪٢٣١‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٤‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Live View shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪) u Live mode /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪) Quick mode /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) Grid 1l /‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Grid 2m /(١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪١:١ / ٩:١٦ / ٣:٤ / ٢:٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Exposure simulation‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪Silent shooting‬‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) Mode 2 / (١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) Disable / (٢‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ ١٦) 16 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠) 30 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec.‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) 1 min.‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) 10 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪ ٣٠) 30 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪) Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪) Erase-protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ(‬
‫‪) Rotate vertical images‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫)‪Specify images to be printed (DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )‪((DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Creative filters‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ ‪ /‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ّﻐﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪) Resize‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫‪RAW image processing‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪1‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(RAW‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪) Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) AF point display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪) Brightness / RGB‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪(RGB /‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪) /Image jump w‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪) 1 image‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) 10 images /‬ﺻﻮﺭ( ‪100 images /‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬
‫)‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ‪) Date /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ‪) Folder /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ‪) Movies /‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪) Stills /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪) Rating /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫]‪) [OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪p / o / n / m / l /‬‬
‫‪Control over HDMI‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٢١٣‬‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫‪٢١٥‬‬
‫‪٢٤٥‬‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫‪١٩٨‬‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫‪٢٧٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Select folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫* ‪Eye-Fi settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪) 1min.‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪) 2 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ ٤) 4 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪8 min. /‬‬
‫)‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪ ١٥) 15 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ ٣٠) 30 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) On / zD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off / D‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Manual reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫‪) Eye-Fi transmission‬ﻧﻘﻞ ‪) Disable :(Eye-Fi‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) Connection information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢١٨‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪٢٧٣‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪) LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪NTSC / PAL‬‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) Enable :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Clean now‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‬
‫‪) Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‪) Remaining capacity ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Shutter count‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪Recharge ،‬‬
‫‪) performance‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪Battery registration ،‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪) Battery history ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٢٧٠‬‬
‫‪INFO. button display‬‬
‫‪) options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪(INFO.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٢٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪Copyright information‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪Firmware Ver.‬‬
‫)ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫‪٢٨٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) Display copyright information‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ‪) Enter author’s name /‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ‪Enter /‬‬
‫‪) copyright details‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ‪Delete /‬‬
‫‪) copyright information‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪٢٦٢‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪C.Fn I :Exposure‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪C.Fn II :Image‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ C.Fn III :Autofocus/Drive‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪C.Fn IV :Operation/Others‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪Clear all Custom‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫)‪) Functions (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪٢٦١‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪) ١‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Movie exposure‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪AF w/ shutter button‬‬
‫‪) during k‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء(‬
‫‪AF and metering‬‬
‫‪) buttons fork‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟـ(‬
‫‪kISO speed setting‬‬
‫‪) increments‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪) Manual /‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪u Live mode /‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪) Quick mode /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻭﺯﺭ >‪<A‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ -١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪) Disable kHighlight tone priority‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Movie recording size‬‬
‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪Sound recording‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫)‪/ 1920x1080 (6 / 5 / 4‬‬
‫)‪/ 1280x720 (8 / 7‬‬
‫)‪/ 640x480 (8 / 7‬‬
‫‪) Crop 640x480‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪(8 / 7) (480×640‬‬
‫‪) Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪) Auto :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) Wind filter‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ(‪) Disable :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪Silent shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ ١٦) 16 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪ ٣٠) 30 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec.‬‬
‫‪) 1 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) 10 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪ ٣٠ /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) Grid 1l /‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Grid 2m /(١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) Mode 2 / (١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) Disable / (٢‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪) ٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Exposure compensation‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪Auto Lighting‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Low /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ‪) Standard /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪) Strong /‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) QPortrait /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫‪) UFaithful /‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪) WUser Def. 1, 2, 3 /‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣ ،٢ ،١‬‬
‫‪White balance‬‬
‫‪/Q/W/E/R/Y/U/I/O‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) P‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪(١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪Custom White Balance‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ٥± ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ )ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ‪) [n] Movie 1‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ (١‬ﻭ‪[o] Movie 2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ (٢‬ﻭ‪) [Z] Movie 3‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ (٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ )ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ‪) [2] Shooting 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ (٢‬ﻭ‪[y] Shooting 3‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ (٣‬ﻭ‪) [z] Shooting 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ (٤‬ﻭ‪) [8] Custom Function‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) [9] My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ]‪ : [1‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫• ]‪ : [7‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٪٩٤ (٢٦٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،(Canon‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢٨٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [7Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٦٨‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٤٤‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ (١٧١‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٥ ،٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٠ ،٤٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) Write/Erase‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫‪٢٨٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٣٩‬ﻭ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :٢-٢‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪Standard/Low/] :‬‬
‫‪) [Disable‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﺸﺒﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪.ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٣-٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ .ISO 100‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪) ISO 100‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٥٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ّ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٣-٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٥٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻂء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <f‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٧-١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،(٠‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Av‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :٧-١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [zSilent shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Custom Controls‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫" ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪" ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ >‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ >‪.<E‬‬
‫< ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ > <‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ >‪ <E‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٥٢‬ﻭ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4AF point disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٣‬‬
‫‪٢٨٨‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )"_‪.("_MG‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .sRGB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪.0001‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫)‪ ٢٠٩‬ﻭ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﻢ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫]‪ [###‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [###‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Eye-Fi settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫]ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ‪) [Eye-Fi settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢٩٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫‪Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the‬‬
‫‪) .lens contacts‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٣‬ﻭ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫‪Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card‬‬
‫‪) .with camera‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻭ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.(٢١٥‬‬
‫‪The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on‬‬
‫‪) .again‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on‬‬
‫‪) .again‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and‬‬
‫‪) .on again or re-install the battery 10, 20,‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ 30, 40,‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪50, 60,‬‬
‫‪ Í 70, 80‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٦‬ﻭ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺠﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RC6-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫******‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫)** ﻡ‪**/‬ﻕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫)** ﻡ‪ **/‬ﻕ(‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫)** ﻡ‪ **/‬ﻕ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Windows 7‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IFC-200U/500U‬‬
‫)** ﻡ‪ **/‬ﻕ( ‪ **) /‬ﻡ‪ **/‬ﻕ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫* ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ **ﻡ‪**/‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪PCMCIA‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪/SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪/SDHC‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪EP-EX15‬‬
‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬
‫‪MT-24EX‬‬
‫‪270EX 430EX II 580EX II Macro Ring Lite‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX‬‬
‫‪ST-E2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪Ef-A‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ‪Eb‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪Eb‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-EOS60D‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ LC-E6‬ﺃﻭ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪CB-570‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CBC-E6‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪Ef-D Ef-S‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫*****‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪BG-E9‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ BGM-E9A‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪AA/LR6‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪BGM-E9L‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪DR-E6‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ACK-E6ACK-E6‬‬
‫‪٢٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AF/AE‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪SDXC‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٩ × ٢٢٫٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٫٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٣:٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٫٠‬‬
‫‪) RAW ،JPEG‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ١٤‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩٠:‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣٤٥٦ × ٥١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٠٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٢٣٠٤ × ٣٤٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٧٢٨ × ٢٥٩٢‬‬
‫‪) S1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪) S2‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٥٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٢٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٥٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )‪(٤٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫‪) S3‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪(٣‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣٤٥٦ × ٥١٨٤‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫١٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٢٥٩٢ × ٣٨٨٨‬‬
‫‪M-RAW‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٧٢٨ × ٢٥٩٢‬‬
‫‪S-RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪:+‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٣ - ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪) ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ ١٠٠٠٠-٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٩٧‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٩٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪ ١-‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪(١-‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪١٫٠+ - ٣٫٠-‬ﻡ‪(dpt) ١-‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ )ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Ef-A‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ °٩±‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪) °١±‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) ٩ :(AF‬ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‬
‫‪) EV -0.5 - 18‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫)ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ )**‪ ٪‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )**‪ ٪‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫‪) EV 1 - 20‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 100 - 3200‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ ISO 100 - 6400 :B ،M ،Av ،Tv ،P‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ -١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 100 - 6400‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪(ISO 12800‬‬
‫‪٢٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪:(AE‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ٥± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ ٣± (AEB‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ١/٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١/٨٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ X‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١/٨٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ،ISO 100) ١٣/٤٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ٥٫٣‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٩٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ *** :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ *** :RAW‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ *** :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١:١ ،٩:١٦ ،٣:٤ ،٢:٣ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠ / ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫)ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪H.264/MPEG-4 AVC‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫‪MOV‬‬
‫‪30p/25p/24p :‬‬
‫‪) ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‬
‫‪60p/50p :‬‬
‫‪) ٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪60p/50p :‬‬
‫‪) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪60p/50p :‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪٢٣٫٩٧٦ :24p ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً ٢٥٫٠٠ :25p ،‬‬
‫* ‪ً ٢٩٫٩٧ :30p‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً ٥٠٫٠٠ :50p ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً ٥٩٫٩٤ :60p ،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪(30p/25p/24p) ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪(60p/50p) ٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٦٥ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪(60p/50p) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٦٥ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪(60p/50p) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ٥± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 6400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 6400‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪٢٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ٣٫٠ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ )‪ (٢:٣‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ١٫٠٤‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ١٠ - ١٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ,‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ّﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٫١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪/(NTSC/PAL‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟـ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪CEC‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪RC-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ACK-E6‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E9‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪AA/LR6‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟـ ‪ CIPA‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ( ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٧٨٫٦ × ١٠٥٫٨ × ١٤٤٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫١ × ٤٫٢ × ٥٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫*** ﺟﻢ ‪ *** /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪،(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫*** ﺟﻢ ‪ *** /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪٢٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٧٫٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٨٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥٦٫٨ × ٢١٫٠ × ٣٨٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٢ × ٠٫٨ × ١٫٥ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢٫٨ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ١٫٢/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٥ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤١ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩٣٫٠ × ٣٣٫٠ × ٦٩٫٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٧ × ١٫٣ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ ‪ ٤٫٦ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻡ ‪ ٣٫٣ /‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ١٫٢/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩٣٫٠ × ٣٣٫٠ × ٦٩٫٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٧ × ١٫٣ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ ‪ ٤٫٤ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪‘٥٠°٢٧ - ‘٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘٢٠°٢٣ - ‘٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪‘٤٠°١٥ - ‘٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ٠٫٨٢ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣٤‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ ٤٥ × ٦٧ - ١٣٤ × ٢٠٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٫٨ × ٢٫٦ - ٥٫٣ × ٨٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ٠٫٨٢ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪E-58‬‬
‫‪ ٧٠٫٠ × ٦٨٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٨ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٧٫١ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪) EW-60C‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫‪) LP814‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫• ‪EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪‘٢٥°١٨ - ‘٣٠°٨٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘٢٥°١٥ - ‘١٠°٧٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪‘٢٥°١٠ - ‘٣٠°٥٣ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣٥‬ﻡ ‪ ١٫١٥ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢١‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٨ × ٧٢ - ٣٩٥ × ٢٥٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٣ x ٢٫٨ - ١٥٫٦ × ١٠٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠٫٣٥‬ﻡ ‪ ١٫١٥ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪E-72U‬‬
‫‪ ٨٧٫٥ × ٨١٫٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٤ × ٣٫٢ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٧٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢٠٫٣ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EW-78E‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫‪٣٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ*‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪‘٣٠°١١ - ‘٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘٣٠°٩ - ‘٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪‘٢٠°٦ - ‘٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ٠٫٤٩ :‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ ١٫٦١ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٥٠٣ × ٣٢٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٩٫٨ × ١٢٫٩ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ٠٫٤٥ :‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ ١٫٤٨ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪ ١١٢ × ٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٤ × ٣٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ(‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢١‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪E-67U‬‬
‫‪ ١٠١٫٠ × ٧٥٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٠ × ٣٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٥٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١٦٫٠ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪) EW-73B‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫• ‪EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪٣٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪‘٥٠°٧ - ‘٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘٣٠°٦ - ‘٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪‘٢٠°٤ - ‘٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٤٥‬ﻡ ‪ ١٫٤٨ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢٤‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ ٦٢ × ٩٣ - ٢٩١ × ٤٥٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٤ × ٣٫٧ - ١١٫٥ × ١٧٫٨ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠٫٤٥‬ﻡ ‪ ١٫٤٨ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪E-72‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٢٫٠ × ٧٨٫٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٠ × ٣٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٩٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢١٫٠ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪) EW-78D‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪‘٢٥°١٨ - ‘٣٠°٧٨ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪‘٢٥°١٥ - ‘٤٠°٦٨ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪‘٢٥°١٠ - ‘٠٠°٤٨ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22 - 32‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣٥‬ﻡ ‪ ١٫١٥ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ ٧٥ × ١١٢ - ٢١٩ × ٣٢٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣ × ٤٫٤ - ٨٫٦ × ١٢٫٩ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠٫٣٥‬ﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪E-67U‬‬
‫‪ ٩٢٫٠ × ٧٨٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٦ × ٣٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٧٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١٦٫٨ /‬ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪) EW-73B‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) CIPA‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻭﺯﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣُﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪LLC. ،SD-3C‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴًﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .MPEG-4‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪".MPEG-4‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣُﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٣٠٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣٌﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ )‪ .(– +‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺰﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ °٠‬ﻭ‪ °٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ‪°٣٢‬ﻭ‪ °١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺼﺎﺏ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٥‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ِ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻨﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣٠٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪DS126281‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ‪(١) :‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻟّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬
‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ‪(٥١٦) ٣٢٨ -٥٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٢٤٠-١٠٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٨٫٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E6‬ﻭ‪.LC-E6E‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪(٢) ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (٣) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ — ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛‬
‫ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺮﻛﻠﻮﺭﻳﺖ – ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٣٠٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٣١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٣١١‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٣١٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٣١٤ .....................EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٣١٥ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٣١٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٣١٧ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪٣١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ EOS DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ZoomBrowser EX‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Win‬‬
‫‪) ImageBrowser /‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Mac‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ MOV‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪Picture Style Editor‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫)ﺳﻴﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪) EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Canon EOS‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) [Digital Installer‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon EOS‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Easy Installation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PDF‬ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ]‪[Software INSTRUCTION MANUAL‬‬
‫)ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [My Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [English‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ZoomBrowser EX / ImageBrowser‬‬
‫‪Picture Style Editor‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪EUx.xW_E_xx‬‬
‫‪EUx.xM_E_xx‬‬
‫‪DPPx.xW_E_xx‬‬
‫‪DPPx.xM_E_xx‬‬
‫‪ZBx.xW_E_xx‬‬
‫‪IBx.xM_E_xx‬‬
‫‪PSEx.xW_E_xx‬‬
‫‪PSEx.xM_E_xx‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Adobe Reader‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ( ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٠ .......................................٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٠ .....................................١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٠ ........................................ ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪١١٠ ...................................Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪٢٥٢ ،١٢١ ....‬‬
‫‪) AI FOCUS‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧٧ .............................. (AI Focus‬‬
‫‪) AI SERVO‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧٧ .............................. (AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪١١٦ ......‬‬
‫‪) B‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪١٢٣ ........................................‬‬
‫‪) w‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ(‪٥٩ ...............................‬‬
‫‪١٣٦ ...............................................FEB‬‬
‫‪٢١١ .................................... HDMI CEC‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ .....................................HDMI‬‬
‫‪٨٤ .............................................. JPEG‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪١١٨ .......................‬‬
‫‪) MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١٦٧ ،٨٠ ................‬‬
‫‪٢٨٠ ،٢١٢ ،١٨٠ ............................ NTSC‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪٧٦ .........................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪١١٢ .....................‬‬
‫‪٢٨٠ ،٢١٢ ،١٨٠ ............................... PAL‬‬
‫‪٢٣٥ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫‪) Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ‪٢٠٠ ،٦٧ ،٤٤ ..................‬‬
‫‪٨٦ ،٨٤ ..........................................RAW‬‬
‫‪٨٤ .................................... RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫‪١١٠ ............................................ sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪١١٤ .............‬‬
‫‪٢٦٢ ................................................. w‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ ‪٢٢١ ....................‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪٩٣ ،٩١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪٢٦٨ ......................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٧١ ،٦٨ ........................................ +‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٠٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪٢٨٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤٣ ............................. (LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٠٧ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪١٠٧ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪٢٦٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢٦٢ ،٢٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪١٨٠ .............................٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪١٠٧ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪١٠٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٩ ،٣٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١١٤ ....................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪٢٥٥ ،١٨٣ .......................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪٢٥٥ ،١٨٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١١٦ .............‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٠ ،٢٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١١٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪١١٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٩ ،٢٦ ،٢٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪٣٢ ........................SDXC‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٧٣ .................................... Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٨ ،٣٢ ......................................SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٤٨ ،٣٢ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٨ ،٣٢ ،١٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٣٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪٤٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ‪٤٩ ،٣٣ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٢٦٠ ........................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪٢٣١ ................................‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪٩٣ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٩٣ ،٦٨ ................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪٢٢٠ ،٩٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪٢٢١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪٢٢١ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٣٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪٩٢ .................................................‬‬
‫‪٣١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪١٣٤ ....................... (FE‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪١٢٢ .................... (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٥٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪٣١ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪٢٥٥ ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪٧٨ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٧٨ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٧٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪٧٨ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٣٠٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٣٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٢٠٠ ،٦٧ ،٤٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٢٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٢٤٣ ،٢١٨ ،١٩٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢١٨ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٠٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪١٠٢ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪١٩٨ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٥١ ،٥٧ .............‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٥٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١٦١ .......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪١٥٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٥٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪١٦٠ .....‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١٦٧ ،٨٠ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٥٩ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١٥٣ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪١٥٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١٦٥ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ‪١٥٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪١٨٥ ،١٥٩ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ‪٨١ ،٦١ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪٨١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٢٦ ،١٢٤ ..‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ‪٦٨ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪٧١ ............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪٦٤ ...................................‬‬
‫‪٣١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٣٢ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٢٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ‪٢٥٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪٢٢٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٢٥٤ ..........‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪٢٥٤ .............‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪١٣١ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪٢٥٤ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪٢٥٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪٥٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪٥٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٩٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪٢٤٥ .................................... DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪٢٢٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪٢٢٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪٢٤٣ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪٤٨ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪٤٨ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪٩٨ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ‪١٠٠ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪٩٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٩٧ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪٩٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪٢٧٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٨٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٩٢ ,٢٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٩١ ،١٨١ ،٨٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪٨٧ ،٨٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪٢٣ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪٩١ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ( ‪٢١٣ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪) A/V‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٢١٢ ،٢٠٢ .............‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ......................‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪٩٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٨ ،٩٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ،١٨٠ .....................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١٠٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪٤ ...........................................3‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪٤ ............................................... M‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٢٩١ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪٦٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫)ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪٤٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) UNLOCK‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ‪٤٢ .....................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪٤٠ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٢٥٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٣٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪٢٦٧ ،٢٥١ ،١٧٥ ،٨٨....‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٨٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٢٥٢ ..........‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪٢٥٢ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ‪٢٩٢ ،٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ،٣ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪٢٤ ،٢٢ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ‪٥٧ ،٢٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٧ ،١٣ ....................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪٢١٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٨٩ .................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٧٨ ،٤٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٦٧ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ‪٥٧ ،٢٧ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٨ ..........................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪١٩٣ ....... (RGB/‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪٢٧٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٢٢٢ ،٨٥ ..............‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٣ ،٦٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٩٣ ،٩١ ،٦٨ ................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪٦٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٩٠ ،٦٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١٩٣ ....(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٢٠٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٢١٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ‪٢١٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٩٢ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ‪١٩٣ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٩٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٩٥ ..‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪١٩٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪١٩٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٨٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪٢١٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪٢١٣ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٢٠٠ ،٦٧ ،٤٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٩١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ...................‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧٧ ،٥٦ ....AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٧٨ ,٧٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪٧٩ ....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١٦٧ ،٨٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٧٦ ............ (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٢٥٥ ،٧٨ .... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٧٩ .... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ‪٢٧٨ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪١٦٤ ،٨٠ ....‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١٦٧ ،٨٠ .......................‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٦٤ ،٨٠ ،٣٩ ،٣٨ ..........‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪٥٦ ......................................‬‬
‫‪٣١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ‪٢٢١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪١١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٧٨ ..‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٧٨ ،٧٦ ..................(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٧٦ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١١٩ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٧٤ ،١١٨ ............‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ‪١١٩ ...................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪٣٩ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪٤٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪٤٠ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٥٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٥٠ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٦٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪٢٧٢ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١٥٣ ،٨٥ ،٢٩ ....................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪٢٣٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٣٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٣٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ‪٢٣٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ‪٢٣٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪٢٤٥ ....................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٤٠ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ‪٢٤٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪٢٤٣ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪٢٣٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) USB‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪٢٣٦ ....................‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٨٤ .......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪١٧١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ،١٨٠ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٤ ،٢١ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪٣٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٠٢ .....................‬‬
‫‪٣٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٦٧ ،٤٣ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٠٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٩٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٨٥ ،١٥٧ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٢٠٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٩٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪٢٢٥ ،١٩٦ ،١٦٧ .....................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪١٩٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٩٤ ..........‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٩١ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٨٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ‪٢٨٣ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪١٩٨ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢٥٧ ،٤٥ ..................‬‬
‫ﻍ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٢٤ ،٢٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ‪٨٢ ..............‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪١٧ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ‪١٥٦ ،١٥٥ ،١١٧ ........‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٢٣ .................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٩٢ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٣٨ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪١٣١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪١٤٨ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪١٣٤ ...................(FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١٣٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١٣٢ .................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٥٨ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٢٥٣ ،١٤٩ ،١٣٠ .........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪١٤٧ ،١٣٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪١٣١ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪١٣٧ ........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪١٣٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٧١ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١٨٢ ،١٧٩ ....(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ‪٢٠٦ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‪٢٠٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪١٨١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪١٨٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪١٨٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٧٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪١٧٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٨٥ ...................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪١٨٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٢٠٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪١٧٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪١٨١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ‪١٨٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٨٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪١٧٨ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ...................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٤٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٧٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٢٦١ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٤٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪٢٦١ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪١٤٩ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٤١ ،٢٠ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٤٢ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪٤١ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪٤١ .................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٤٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪٢٥٧ ،١٢٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪٢٩٢ ،٢٠٩ ،٢٠٢ ،٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٢٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٢٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٥١ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٢٦٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٨٥ ........................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ‪١٠٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١٥٣ ،٨٥ ،٢٩ ........................‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪٢٧٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪٩١ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٢٢٢ ،٨٥ ...........‬‬
‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ‪٣٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪٢٧٢ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪١٧٧ ،١٥٥ ....................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٥٨ .............................‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٠١ ،٥٣ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٢٩٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٠ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪١٨٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ‪٢٢٠ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪١٣٧ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪١٣٧ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪١٣٧ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪١١٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ‪٣٩ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪١٢٧ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪١٢٧ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪٢٠٥ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٢١٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٥١ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪٣٣ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪١٢٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪١٢١ ،١٠٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٢٤ ....‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪٢٢٤ ..................... RAW‬‬
‫‪٣٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪١٥٦ ،١٥٥